2008 Cadillac Escalade EXT Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle to
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
Front Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
Power Seats
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire control up or down.
The power reclining seatback control is located behind
the power seat control on the outboard side of the
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,
Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side
of the seats.
Power Lumbar
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold
the front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold
the rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire
seat, press the bottom button with the heated seat
and seatback symbol.
Heated Seats
If the front seats have the
heated seat feature, the
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
This symbol will appear on the climate control display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seat off.
Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium
, and one for low.
the climate control panel.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after
the ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated
seat feature after you restart the vehicle, you will
need to press the appropriate heated seat button again.
If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats, see
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
press the top button with the heated seatback symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seatback off.
Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
press the button with the heated seatback symbol.
Heated and Cooled Seats
If the front seats have the
heated and cooled seat
feature, the buttons
used to control this feature
are located on the
climate control panel.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seatback off.
Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire
seat, press the button with the heated seat and seatback
symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seat off.
Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
{ (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, press the
button with the cooled seat symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the cooled seat off.
Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level
of cooling selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the
ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated
and cooled seat feature after you restart your vehicle,
you will need to press the appropriate seat button again.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
Your vehicle has the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the driver’s door, and are
used to program and
recall memory settings
for the driver’s seat,
outside mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature,
if your vehicle has it.
page 2-34 for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall the mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat, mirror, and adjustable pedal
movement will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”
more information.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can
be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable
pedal switch.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position,
the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall
may stop working. If this happens, remove the
obstruction and press the appropriate function control
for two seconds. Then try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
Further programming for the memory seat feature
can be done using the DIC. You can select the
automatic easy exit seat feature or the remote
memory seat recall feature.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,
Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
The controls for the power reclining seatback are located
on the outboard side of the front seats behind the power
seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
the release button (A),
located on the top of
the seatback, while
you push the head
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seat is a 60/40 split bench seat that can be
folded to give you more cargo space and access to
for more information on operation of the folding midgate.
restraint down.
To fold either side of the seat do the following:
1. Push the rear seat head restraints all the way down.
2. Pull the seat loop
located where the
seatback and
The front seats may have head restraints that also
tilt forward and rearward.
seat cushion meet.
The seat cushion
will release and allow
you to tilt it toward
the front of the vehicle.
To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of the restraint
while pressing the button (B), located on the inboard
side of the head restraint, and move it forward or
rearward until the desired locking position is reached.
Try to move the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The second row seats may have head rests that can
be adjusted up and down, but they do not tilt.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat.
You may have to move the front seats
forward slightly to do this.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
be sure to press the rear of the seat cushion
down. This action locks the seatback in place.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
To return the seats to the normal position, push
the seatback up and fold the seat cushion down.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Raise the head restraint.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when
the vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling
from a moving vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions,
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash,
your body would move too far forward, which
would increase the chance of head and neck
injury. Also, the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not as strong as
shoulder bones. You could also severely
injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right
on the abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature
may affect the passenger sensing system.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten
the lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for
the driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down,
squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the
height adjuster and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the buttons
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each rear passenger position in
the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide
to the shoulder belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective
is wearing them properly.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made
to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross
the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones
in a crash. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is
not possible to hold it. For example, in a
crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)
infant will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg)
force on a person’s arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing
child seat (B) provides
restraint for the
child’s body with
the harness.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the
LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing
a child restraint with a top tether, you must also
use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to
properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint
must never be installed using only the top tether
and anchor.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach
a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with
the LATCH system.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Rear Seat
The right side rear passenger and center seating
positions have exposed metal anchors located in the
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located near the top
tether anchors.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of the
rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating
position. Fold down the rear seatback(s) to access
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach the top tether to the
top tether anchor, if there is one. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the following steps:
1.1. To access the top tether anchors, raise the
seat cushion by pulling up on the strap
loop at the rear of the seat cushion and fold
the seat cushion forward. Then fold the
seatback forward until it is flat. See Rear
information.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.2. Place the child restraint in the vehicle, near
the seating position that you are using.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3. Route the top tether according to your
child restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the
tether around the
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
headrest or head restraint.
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or
head restraint and
in between the headrest
or head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.4. Attach the top tether attachment to the
top tether anchor.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
{CAUTION:
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with
your child restraint to make sure it is compatible
with this vehicle.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
1.5. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward.
Then lower the seat cushion until the
seatback and the seat cushion lock
into position.
2. Attach the lower attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired seating position does
not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint
with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer
to your child restraint manufacturer instructions
and the instructions in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
2.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
2.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
3. Tighten the top tether.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten
the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
this, including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
for additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-33.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten
the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger
and the passenger seated directly behind the
right front passenger.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle, during a
vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.
They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path
of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front
passenger, and second row outboard passengers
are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the
driver’s or right front passenger’s head and chest.
However, they are only designed to inflate if the
impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to
predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
Whether your frontal airbags will or should
deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat. The seat position sensor provides information
that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy
at a reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-56. Roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition,
these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during
a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows
that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of
collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion
is not toward those airbags. See When Should an
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe
side collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at
least partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system
will include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers
the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off,
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-33.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present
in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone
in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,
which helps the passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts”
and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional
information about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-70 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation
of the airbag system.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery
or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-72
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and
airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being
used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, door locks,
tailgate, and side storage boxes.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can
also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased operating range of 195 feet
(60 m) away. However, the operating range may
be less while the vehicle is running. As a result,
you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn
it off than you were to start it.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote
Start Similar)
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
/(Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Q(Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors, including
the tailgate.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps will flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC,
the horn will chirp when Qis pressed again within
three seconds of the previous press of the lock button.
additional information.
If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lights will
turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside. See
“APPROACH LIGHTING” under DIC Vehicle
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Pressing Q will arm the content theft-deterrent system.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release Lto locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door.
will flash and the horn will sound three times.
If " is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors, including the tailgate will unlock.
Press and hold Lfor more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
If it is dark enough outside, your interior lamps will
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the turn
signal lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has
to ON/RUN or Lis pressed again. The ignition
must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to
be re-coded to match the new transmitter. The
lost transmitter will no longer work after the new
transmitters are re-coded. The vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. See
“Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery:
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY
IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC.
See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under
additional information.
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch, located above
the metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is
low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the
key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle
to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
During a remote start, the climate control system will
default to a heating or cooling mode depending on
the outside temperatures.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures
and will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, during remote start, you will need
to manually turn the heated seats on and off. See
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button.
The vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press
and hold the transmitter’s remote start button
until the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see
the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote
start button for two to four seconds. Pressing the
remote start button again after the vehicle has
started will turn the engine off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using the remote start to have the vehicle
in view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
After your vehicles engine has been started two times
using the remote vehicle start button, or a single remote
start with one time extension, the vehicle must be
started with the key.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be remote started again.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in
the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is
an emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate
times between driving sequences. The engine will
run for 10 minutes after each remote start.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled
or disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”
additional information.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
your RKE transmitter will have extended range that
will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle from
approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the doors.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking
feature and immediately lock all the doors.
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use
the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back
on again by doing the following:
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, slide the
manual lever up or down, or use the power door locks
switch.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the RKE transmitter.
Power Door Locks
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
The power door lock switches are located on the
armrest on the front doors.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
K(Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors and tailgate.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Q(Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock
symbol to lock the doors and tailgate.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
page 3-57 for more information on DIC programming.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a door
is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last
door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal
that the delayed locking feature is in use.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn
it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks.
These prevent passengers from opening the
rear doors from the inside.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual
lock, using the power door lock switch, or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one.
The rear door security
locks are located on
the inside edge of
each rear door.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn
it so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
Security Lock Label
shown
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
The rear doors must be open to access them.
The label showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Midgate®
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
This will force outside air into your
vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area
covered and the tailgate and the Midgate® open
because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come
into your vehicle. You can not see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the cargo covers on and
the tailgate and Midgate® open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
Midgate®:
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Midgate® Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with a Midgate® and a
removable rear glass panel. The Midgate® allows
you to extend the length of your vehicle’s cargo area.
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed on the
setting that brings in outside air.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are the main components of the
Midgate® system:
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
{CAUTION:
If the removable rear glass is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle
in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in
the vehicle could be injured. Whenever you
store the rear glass in the vehicle, always be
sure that it is stored securely in the Midgate®
storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster
is on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster
on, you may see a discharge spark coming from the
latch area.
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch
Release Button
E. Window Retaining Tabs
F. Midgate® Release
Handle
G. Window Alignment
Arrows
D. Glass Lock Knobs
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
on page 1-10 for more information. The front
seats may have to be moved forward slightly to
allow the rear seats to fold completely.
Although the rear glass can be removed without
folding the rear seats, you will not be able to
access the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure
to fold the seats before removing the rear glass.
2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A),
located near the upper corners of the rear glass,
to unlatch. Once unlatched, the glass-catch release
button (C) will catch the rear glass and prevent it
from falling forward.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. While holding the rear glass in place, press
the glass-catch release button (C) and pull the
top of the rear glass toward you using the grab
handle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass.
4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from
the lower window frame channel. Use the grab
handles to assist you in removing the rear glass.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both
top corners of the storage pocket, to the locked
position. Push in on the corner of the rear glass
to allow the lock knob to engage more easily.
5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the
Midgate®, guiding the lower edge of the rear glass
behind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket,
with grab handles facing you, until the next step.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked
position, the rear glass is securely stored.
7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position.
You should hear a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn
the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of
the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.
The rear seats can be returned to the normal
position when the rear glass is out and stored
properly in the storage pocket.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket
using the grab handles.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to align the rear
glass side-to-side using
the alignment arrows (G).
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push
the rear glass flat against the window frame.
Use the grab handles at the top of the rear glass
to assist you.
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place
the bottom edge in the lower channel of the
window frame.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lowering the Midgate® with the
Rear Glass in Place
The Midgate® can be lowered to allow the cargo
area of your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear
glass can be either installed in its normal position,
or it can be removed and stored in the rear glass
storage pocket.
To lower the Midgate®, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to
be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats
for more information.
6. Push the rear glass flat against the window
frame and push each latch lever up until it locks.
You should hear a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Glass in Normal Position
3. Lower the Midgate® until it is flat.
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the
Midgate® securely so it does not fall forward.
Turn the Midgate® handle clockwise and pull
the Midgate® toward you.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lowering the Midgate® with the
Rear Glass in the Storage Pocket
Midgate® Lowered with Crossbar Attached
This procedure works the same as the procedure
described previously, but when you lower the Midgate®
with the rear glass in the stored position, you will notice
that the entire crossbar will lower with the Midgate®.
This is completely normal; however, since the crossbar
lowers with the Midgate®, it will be heavier. As you lower
the Midgate® be ready for the extra weight and do not let
the Midgate® fall as you lower it.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
Raising the Midgate®
To return the Midgate® to its normal position, raise the
Midgate® up with a firm swinging motion until it latches
into place securely. This will help to ensure that the
Midgate® closes with enough force to engage the latches.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like
to put it back, do so using the instructions given
previously.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate is not to be removed. This may cause
damage to electrical connector resulting in loss
of lock/unlock and rear vision camera function.
Tailgate
Power Running Boards
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have power running boards.
The power running boards automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door
has been opened. Once the door is closed, the running
boards will automatically move back under the vehicle
after a brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving
for the running boards to extend or retract.
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the
tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at
low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can
easily lose their balance and fall in response
to vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving
vehicle may result in serious injuries or death.
Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
The switch used to
disable the power
running boards is
located on the center
console below the
climate control system.
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while
pulling the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, push it firmly upward until it
latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure
it is latched securely.
The running boards cannot be disabled in the
extended position.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme
heat and suffer permanent injuries or even
death from heat stroke. Never leave a child,
a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in
the ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
Driver’s Side shown
The driver’s door also has switches that control the
passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-32.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise
the window.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and
Pull-out Extension
Windows with an express-down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch.
Press down fully on the window switch, then release,
to activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on
the front edge of the switch.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from
the center mount and swing it to the side to cover
the side window.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch
is located with the power window switches on the
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the
lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come
on to show the lockout feature is on.
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the
sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the
lamps on.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Sun Visors
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the
side window. It can also be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is the security light.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The
horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will
flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes,
then will turn off to save the battery power.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with
the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also
remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
page 2-11.
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on
the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will
not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
The content theft deterrent system does not sense if
the midgate or tailgate are open or ajar, therefore,
vehicle contents may not be protected if the midgate
is left open or ajar.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+
Testing the Alarm
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the RKE transmitter.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch
will not work.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder
in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key
is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new additional key:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in
the ignition and start the engine. If the engine
will not start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position and the ON/RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the ACC/
ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period of time.
C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the
regular brake pedal must be applied.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition
and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature.
The key can only be removed when the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is
an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave
the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for
up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Starting Procedure
• Audio System
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding it there as you
hold the key in START for up to a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts, let go of the key
and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
engine and protects components. If the ignition
key is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds
or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start
and the key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
Your vehicle has an adjustable throttle and brake
pedal that lets you change their positions. This feature
is designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals can
not move farther away from the standard position, but
can move toward the driver for better pedal reach.
The feature will not operate when the vehicle is
in REVERSE (R) or while using the cruise control.
The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the
center console below the climate control system.
Press the right and left arrows to move the pedals either
closer or further from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows the
pedals to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering
fluid reservoir.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you
will be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can
give you the best advice for that particular area.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle
has a heavy load, you may notice an increase in
the effort to shift out of PARK (P). See Torque Lock
(Automatic Transmission) under Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-42 for more information.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle has a Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic
transmission, and has an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster. The
electronic shift position indicator displays when the
shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-42. If you are pulling a trailer,
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine
is not running at high speed when shifting your
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next
gear and has more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL MODE (M): This position lets drivers select
the range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. See Driver Shift Control (DSC) later in
this section.
If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current
vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission
does not upshift and instead holds the current gear.
In some cases, this may appear to be a delayed shift,
however the transmission is operating normally.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls
that compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed
ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer.
The transmission constantly makes adjustments to
improve vehicle performance according to how the
vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or when
temperature changes. During this adaptive shift controls
process, shifting may feel different as the transmission
determines the best settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic® 6L80
automatic transmission’s gear shifting may be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up.
Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold transmission.
This difference in shifting is normal.
Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that
adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed
to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine will
be able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things
such as vehicle speed, throttle position and vehicle load.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC display will show the message MANUAL
SHIFT on the first line and the current gear will be
displayed on the second line. See Driver Information
number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that
can be used. However, your vehicle can automatically
shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions.
This means that all gears below that number are
available. When FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1)
through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically shifted by
the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used until the
plus/minus button located on the steering column lever
is used to change to the gear.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Grade Braking is not available when the Driver Shift
for more information.
Your vehicle has a Driver Shift Control (DSC).
The DSC controls the vehicle’s transmission and
vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer
by allowing you to select a desired range of gears.
While using the DSC, cruise control and the tow/haul
mode can be used.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE (M).
2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift or downshift
selecting the desired range of gears for your current
driving conditions.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
Tow/Haul Mode
Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer
on page 4-43 for more information.
The tow/haul mode works with the Autoride® feature,
if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when trailering
Grade Braking
Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine
and the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces
wear on the brakes system and increases control of
the vehicle. The system constantly monitors the vehicle’s
speed, acceleration, throttle position, and whether the
brake pedal is being pressed, and determines when
to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down.
The system will then automatically command downshifts
that reduces the vehicles speed, until the brake pedal
is no longer being pressed. This indicates the desired
vehicle speed has been reached.
Your vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode
adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift
cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle
control, and transmission cooling when towing or
hauling heavy loads.
Press the button located on the end of the shift lever
to turn the tow/haul on or off. When the tow/haul is on,
a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modes
can be activated by pressing the button on the end
of the shift control stalk. While in the DSC mode,
grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to
select a gear.
for more information.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when
the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 5 mph (8 km/h).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever,
with the parking brake symbol and located above
the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set. After the shift lever is moved
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can,
it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving
it up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. It might be difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before releasing the parking brake.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission.
Then you should be able to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have
your vehicle serviced soon.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite.
Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle
even if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-43.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Mirrors
AUTO 3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam”
button for about three seconds to turn the
compass/temperature display on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Intellibeam®, OnStar®,
Compass, and Temperature Display
When the ignition and the display features are on,
the display will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading and temperature.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with Intellibeam®, OnStar®, compass and
temperature display. For more information on OnStar®,
on Intellibeam®, see “Intellibeam® Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System” under Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show the
correct direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a similar
magnetic item.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the
compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.
Outside temperature is also shown in the display.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the “auto highbeam”
button for about nine seconds until CAL is shown in
the compass display.
Automatic Dimming
Your vehicle has an inside automatic dimming rearview
mirror. The automatic dimming feature is activated
whenever the vehicle is turned on and dims only
during nighttime driving.
The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads the correct direction.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
mirror is not adjusted to account for zone changes,
the compass could give false readings.
To adjust for zone changes:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the zone map that
follows.
2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
about six seconds until a zone number appears
in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the “auto highbeam” button quickly until you
reach the correct zone number. Stop pressing the
button and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
needs calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Temperature
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Outside temperature is shown in the mirror display.
Temperature will be displayed in Fahrenheit or
Celsius based on the choice of English or metric
in the vehicle’s configuration menu.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for
an extended period of time, please consult your
dealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, a delay
in updating the temperature is normal.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system, if equipped,
on page 2-56 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
P(On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located on the far left
of the mirror face, to turn the compass/temperature
display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the automatic dimming mirror,
do the following:
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs
to be calibrated. For more information, see
“Compass Calibration” following.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located
to the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not,
press and hold the on/off button until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror
is in automatic dimming mode.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
do the following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either
a flashing F or C appears.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button until
the green indicator light turns off.
2. Press the button again to change the display
to the desired unit of measurement. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new unit will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed
for an extended period of time, please see your
GM dealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay
in updating the temperature is normal.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
Compass Variance
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if the vehicle is outside of zone
eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long
distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the
difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, the compass could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release
the button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
Compass Calibration
Cleaning the Mirror
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
The outside power
foldaway mirror controls
are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if
the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again
to deselect the mirror.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
This mirror has the following features.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again
to deselect the mirror.
Automatic Dimming
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare
of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic
• Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb View Assist
Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function. This
feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the
curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to
its original position when the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to
OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-57.
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex glass.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can
be seen from the driver’s seat.
Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle has a turn signal indicator on the mirror.
An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is located
on the climate control panel. Press this button to warm
the driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors to
help clear them of ice, snow, and condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and
while backing; vehicle damage, injury, or
death could occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind your vehicle before backing up.
While backing, be sure to look for objects
and check your vehicle’s mirrors.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid
other vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates
at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). It can determine
how close objects are to the rear bumper, up to
8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The distance
sensors are located on the rear bumper.
On some vehicles
this display is located
above the rear window
towards the center of
the vehicle and can be
seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
If your vehicle has the display, there are three
color-coded lights to provide distance and system
information.
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle does not have the display and it has
URPA, you will hear the beeps as described in the
following information.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the
URPA display as you get closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will then
briefly illuminate to let you know the system is working.
Description
amber light
English
8 ft
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you are above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
40 in
23 in
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below Midgate®/tailgate
level. Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from
your rear bumper. This distance may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep
for three seconds
1 ft
0.3 m
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
The indicator light will
come on to indicate that
URPA is off.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for three seconds when
you are closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
When the System Does Not Seem
to Work Properly
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was hanging out of your
Midgate®/tailgate during your last drive cycle,
the red light may illuminate in the rear display.
Once the attached object is removed, URPA
will return to normal operation.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar button and they can contact
Roadside Service for you.
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar Services
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Some OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock
or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
available until you register with OnStar.
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated
into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button
for a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR”
to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or
AACN system deploys. The vehicle information
usually includes your GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding
the accident that your vehicle has been involved in
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and
giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e.g. the direction from which your vehicle was hit).
When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar
your GPS location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service in that area.
OnStar service also cannot work unless you are in
a place where the wireless service provider OnStar
has hired for that area has coverage, network capacity
and reception when the service is needed, and
technology that is compatible with the OnStar service.
Not all services are available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the
OnStar advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, this means that your system is not functioning
properly and should be checked by your dealer/retailer.
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar subscription has expired. You can always
press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar
equipment is active.
Location information about your vehicle is only
available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. You only need the original remote
control transmitter for Fixed Code programming.
It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease
termination of the vehicle, the programmed buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are
Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or security
device you are programming.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what you used for the garage door opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
If these instructions do not work, you probably have
a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed
Code garage door opener.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a
row of dip switches similar to the graphic above,
you have a Fixed Code garage door opener.
If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use
the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples, but they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from
left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes
you enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings
that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from
left to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.
Now press one button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting as follows:
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button
in the vehicle.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. You may need to hold
the button from five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,
choosing a different button in Step 6 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will
be erased.
Using Universal Home Remote
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 7-5.
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Storage
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have a closed storage area on the
instrument panel above the compact disc changer.
You can open the storage area by pressing in the
bottom of the lid and the lid will automatically raise up.
Press down on the lid to close the storage area.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has cupholders for the front and rear
passengers.
Your vehicle has a console compartment between
the bucket seats. The console has both an upper and
lower storage bin that can be opened by lifting up on
the latches located at the front of the console lids.
The console may have an accessory power outlet
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
The cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers and on the rear of the center console
for the rear passengers.
To use the front cupholders, press down on the access
door and release. The door will then open. Push the
door back down to close it.
To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the door
located on the back of the console.
The front cupholder may be removed for cleaning
by pushing down and then back on the cupholder.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Luggage Carrier
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
to the siderail supports.
The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be
used to load things on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof.
It may also have crossrails which can be moved
back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from
sliding. To move a crossrail, turn the release knobs,
on both sides of the rail, counterclockwise to
loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired position
balancing the force side to side. Turn the release
knobs, on both sides of the rail, clockwise to tighten
it. Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly
to be sure it is tight.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports.
Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the
load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails
are damaged.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-35.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are
driving, check now and then to make sure the
luggage and cargo are still securely fastened.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
When loading items on the roof, take care not
to block or damage the CHMSL.
Cargo Cover Panels
{CAUTION:
Rear Seat Armrest
Improperly stored cargo cover panels could
be thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove a panel, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that is securely
reattached.
Your vehicle’s second row seat may have an
armrest/storage compartment.
Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower
the armrest.
To open the compartment, push the button on
the front of the armrest and pull the top open.
Notice: Exceeding the weight limit of 250 lbs
(113 kg) can damage the cargo covers, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not put anything on top of the cargo covers over
the weight limit.
Your vehicle has a three-piece cargo cover system.
The cargo panels can be removed and stored in
the cargo area of the vehicle.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove a cargo panel(s), do the following:
for more information on the tailgate.
2. Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and right
cargo panel latches, located on the bottom of
each cargo panel, toward you to unlock the cargo
panel latches.
Before removing the cargo panel(s), notice the
numbers embossed on the upper center portion
of each panel. The panels are labeled 1, 2 and 3.
Corresponding numbered labels are also on
the bottom of the panels. These numbers on the
top and bottom of the panels will be used as
reference in the steps for removing, storing and
reinstalling the panels.
3. Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the side
rails and set it aside. You only need to remove
as many cargo panels as needed for your cargo
carrying needs.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and
set it aside.
5. Remove cargo panel 1, but notice that there
are four latches to release (two left-side and
two right-side latches). Set the panel aside.
After each cargo panel is removed, store them
within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel
storage system.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Secure the storage
strap system in the
cargo storage area
by attaching the
Cargo Panel Storage System
The three cargo panels can be stored in the cargo area
using the storage strap system. To store the panels,
do the following:
six clips on the cargo
strap system to
the tie down locations
on either side of
the storage area.
Always use the storage strap system to store the
cargo panels during driving.
Before storing the cargo panels, be sure that their
latches are in the locked position. The latches are
in the locked position when they are parallel to
the front and back edge of the panel.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following instructions for the proper storage
sequence and location for each panel:
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panel
with latches up and facing away from you.
A. Secure clip A on the secondary strap.
B. Secure clip B on the secondary strap.
C. Place the remaining primary straps on
top of the lid and tray.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel with
latches down and facing toward you.
4. Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel with
latches up and facing away from you.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tighten all straps by pulling on the free end of
each strap.
5. Place the primary straps over the three cargo
covers (A). Fasten the four strap clips (B).
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Close both cross locks at the center of the strap
system to secure tightly.
Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels
To reinstall a cargo panel do the following.
1. You can either leave the strap system attached
to the side of the cargo area while it is not in
use, or you can store it inside the top box
storage compartment. See Top-Box Storage
on page 2-86 for more information.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against
the Midgate® and then let the back of the
panel down being sure that the pegs align with
the receivers.
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in
the unlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Install cargo cover 2 next. Place the latches in
the unlocked position. Place the cargo cover
panel on the cargo area rails while holding the
back of the cargo panel up.
3. Push both left latches away from you to lock the
latches. Remember that there are four latches
total for panel 1. You should hear a click when
each latch locks correctly. Lock the remaining
two right latches on panel 1.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
The left latch on the cargo covers must be locked
in place before you can lock the right latch. If you
do not follow this exactly, the cargo cover panels
may not lock in place correctly.
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
5. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks correctly.
6. Install cargo cover 3 next. Place the latches in
the unlocked position. Place the cargo cover
panel on the cargo area rails while holding the
back of the cargo panel up.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding and Storage of Straps
To store the folding straps inside the top box storage
compartment, do the following:
1. Extend the six strap ends on a flat surface.
7. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks correctly.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Fold the four primary strap ends towards the
center as shown.
4. Take the secondary strap and wrap it around the
package. Finally, attach the hooks to the webbing
and place inside the top box storage compartment.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area
that you can use to strap cargo in.
3. Take the short strap and surround the folded
webbing, forming a package.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Weather Cargo Area
Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different
configurations—cargo panels on or off, Midgate®
up or down, rear glass in or out. The vehicle has
features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo
inside the cargo area. Your vehicle is designed to
quickly direct water out of the cargo box. The top
drain grates, side rail channels, catch cups, Midgate®
drain, cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo
mat help do this.
Even when all of these things are working properly
and the cover system is on, there may be some
instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)
when water may be present in the following areas:
A. Top drain grates
B. Removable
front drain grate
(Midgate®
E. Water drainage area
(around both sides of
the cargo box and
tailgate side)
drain grate)
F. Rear drains
C. Side rail channels
and catch cups
D. Front drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat (central area of
mat is intended to be dry)
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove each drain grate, do the following:
on page 2-69 for more information.
Maintenance and Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the Midgate®, tailgate and
cover system are fully closed and that all parts
are clean and not blocked with debris. Follow the
instructions given next in this section for the proper
procedures on cleaning each item.
Top Drain Grates – Removal and
Cleaning
2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from
the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.
The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on
both sides of the vehicle. Clean the grates and drains
if there is a blockage.
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the drain grate do the following:
Side Rail Channels
of the cargo area. You may want to flush them out
with clean water if you notice any debris collecting
inside of them.
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in
the grate.
When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful
not to damage the rails.
2. When you are sure that the clips are aligned with
the slots, push the grate down firmly.
The grate should clip into place. Do not force the grate
if it will not clip into place, realign the clips with the
holes and try again.
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Midgate® Drain Grate Removal
and Cleaning
After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. you will need
to flush the midgate drain with water. But first you will have
to remove the drain grate by using the following steps:
The Midgate® drain grate is located near the base
of the Midgate® in the cargo area. You will find
a removable drain grate covering the drain.
for more information.
2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate.
3. Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it
straight out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Area Floor Drains
Top-Box Storage
Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains
located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo
area. These drains should be cleaned periodically to
allow water to exit the cargo area.
Your vehicle has top-box storage units on both sides
of the vehicle. The passenger side top box contains
the tools you will need to change a flat tire.
Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock it. Press the
key cylinder button and swing the lid open. Turn on
the cargo lamps, if the vehicle has them, for more light
more information.
The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can
flush the drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo
area is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the
cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush
the drains with water.
2-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition
needs to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active,
the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off, or until a front door is opened.
for more information.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops
the sunroof from opening to the full-open position.
From the comfort stop position, press the rear of the
driver’s side switch a second time to open the sunroof
to the full-open position.
There are two switches
in the overhead console
that operate the sunroof.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open
the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of
the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the
switch a second time. To express-close the sunroof,
fully press and release the front of the driver’s side
switch. The sunroof will close automatically. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second
time. The sunshade will open automatically with
the sunroof, but can also be opened manually.
2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops
the sunroof from opening to the full-open position.
From the comfort stop position, press the rear of
the driver’s side switch a second time to open the
sunroof to the full-open position.
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will
then open halfway, and the air deflector will raise.
To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when
it closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it
has re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close” or
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract
when the sunroof is closed.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open
feature. From the closed position, press the rear of
the passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time. To close the sunroof, press and hold
the front of the passenger’s side switch. To stop
the sunroof partway, release the switch.
“Express-Close” functions described previously.
2-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
Washer Fluid Button (If Equipped). See Windshield
Disable Button (If Equipped). See Power Running
Heated Seats (If Equipped). See Heated Seats
on page 1-4. Heated and Cooled Seats (If Equipped).
Disable Button. See. Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Navigation/Radio System (if equipped). See
page 3-14.
on page 3-20.
on page 3-11.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also
let police know you have a problem.
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
Tilt Wheel
located on top of the
steering column.
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column under the turn signal lever.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button with this
symbol is located
on the left side of
the steering wheel.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel
on or off. A light on the button will display when
the feature is turned on.
• 53Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
The steering wheel will take about three minutes
to start heating.
on page 3-9.
on page 3-10.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
turn signal.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for
less than one second until the arrow starts to flash.
This will cause the turn signals to automatically
flash three times. It will flash six times if the tow-haul
mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for
more than one second will cause the turn signals to
flash until you release the lever. The lever will return
by itself when it is released.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-50. To turn the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash
in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
6 (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or short
delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
cluster will also be on.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for approximately three minutes, or if the wiper switch
is turned to the off position. If it is dark outside, the
headlamps will remain on.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
Your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers.
These wipers automatically turn on when a sensor,
mounted next to the inside rearview mirror, detects
moisture on the windshield. When active, these wipers
are able to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
Windshield Washer
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must
be set to one of the five delay settings. Each of the
five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
{CAUTION:
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting, position
three, be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The rain sensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to
the weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
Rainsense™ mode even when it is not raining.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return
to the preset speed.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically after approximately eight wipes.
The headlamps will turn off if the wiper switch is set
to a delay position, and there have been no wipes
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from your windshield.
{CAUTION:
The button is located
in the switchbank under
the climate controls.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip,
and you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. The indicator
light will flash. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on
long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, cruise control is turned off.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise control back on.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is
a normal condition.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side
of the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
T(On/Off): This button can both activate and turn
off the system. The indicator light on the button turns
on when cruise control is on and turns off when
cruise control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or make the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the cruise
control. But you do not need to reset it.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The
vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and
stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the
automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL).
Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will
turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on.
Exterior Lamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into the PARK (P)
position.
The exterior lamps
control is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
set the headlamps to automatically turn on at normal
brightness, together with the following:
steering wheel.
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Taillamps
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IntelliBeam® is an enhancement to your vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on your
rearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
The IntelliBeam® system will turn your high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other
traffic present, and the IntelliBeam® system is enabled.
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps together with the following
lamps listed below.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle
is on, the headlamps will turn off automatically
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the
headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off,
the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before
automatically turning off to prevent the battery from
being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off and
then back to the headlamp on position to make
the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam®
Press and release the IntelliBeam® button on the
inside rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam® indicator
on the mirror will turn on to let you know the system
has been turned on. Once the system has been turned
on, it will remain on each time the vehicle is started.
Additionally, the IntelliBeam® system must be enabled.
To enable the IntelliBeam® system, turn the exterior lamp
control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever in
its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light will appear
on the instrument panel cluster when the high-beams
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
IntelliBeam® Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with IntelliBeam®
IntelliBeam® will only activate your high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam® will be disabled until
the control is turned back to the AUTO position.
The high-beam headlamps will remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam®, until any of the
following situations occur:
• The IntelliBeam® system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam® may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of
any of the following:
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist or other airborne obstructions.
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of
the IntelliBeam light sensor.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam® feature will be disabled and the
IntelliBeam® light in the mirror will turn off until the
high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze or other obstructions.
• If IntelliBeam® was using low-beams prior to this
action, the IntelliBeam® feature will be temporarily
disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral
position.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam® Light Sensor
You may need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam®
at the Rearview Mirror
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
in front of the inside
rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam® can be disabled by using the controls on
the inside rearview mirror.
AUTO 3(On/Off): To disable the system, press this
button on the inside rearview mirror. The IntelliBeam®
indicator will turn off and will not come back on until
the IntelliBeam® button is pressed again.
(Stalk Disable): When IntelliBeam® has turned on
the high-beams, pull or push the high-beam stalk. This
will disable IntelliBeam®. The IntelliBeam® indicator
on the mirror will turn off. To re-enable IntelliBeam®,
press the IntelliBeam® button on the mirror.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
Headlamps on Reminder
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam® indicator
light flashes three times. If you accidentally activate
this, the vehicle’s setting will automatically be reset
each time the ignition is turned off and then on again.
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when your
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and
your key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turn
the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on,
or close and re-open the door. In the AUTO mode, the
headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK or may
remain on until the headlamp delay ends (if enabled
in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting” under DIC Vehicle
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch
is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system will turn on
the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other
lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
roof marker lamps, and the instrument panel lights.
The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn
the exterior lamps switch to the off position and
then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the PARK (P) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top
of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered,
or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems
so that driving under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the system. The DRL
and automatic headlamp system will only be affected
when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than the delay.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must
be in the PARK (P) position, before the DRL lamps
can be turned off.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the
fog lamp button again.
Fog Lamps
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
You can use the cargo lamp if you need more light in
the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box storage
units. Some vehicles will only have a cargo lamp in
the driver side top box.
The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your
instrument panel.
-(Fog Lamps): Press the button to turn the
fog lamps on. An indicator light will come on in the
instrument panel cluster to let you know that the
fog lamps are on. Press the button again to turn
them off.
The cargo lamps come on by turning on the interior
dome lamps.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp Override
The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior
lamps control.
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights and the radio display. This only
works if the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the knob all the way clockwise.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
Dome Lamps
When a door is opened or the key is removed from
the ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located next
to the exterior lamps control, clockwise to the farthest
position. In this position, the dome lamps remain
on whether a door is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to turn it on or off.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn each one on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable
to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are
left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition
is in LOCK. This will help prevent the battery from
running down.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan
at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory
power outlets.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use
power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF
may cause the vehicle’s battery to run down.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding electrical equipment.
One accessory power outlet is located inside the center
floor console. Lift up on the lower latch located at the
front of the console lid to access the accessory
power outlet.
There may also be an accessory power outlet located on
the rear of the center floor console above the cupholder.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the electrical equipment you install.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use, always cover the
accessory power outlet with the protective cap.
Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the
accessory power outlets.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
power outlet, the battery may drain causing your
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This
would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug
all electrical devices when turning off your vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
The front ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in
the center console near the cupholders, if the vehicle
has them. Press on the access door to open it and
use the ashtray and lighter.
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust
the clock:
1. The adjustment button is located in the lower
left corner of the clock.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before reaching the desired time.
To remove the ashtray, pull it from the center console.
Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time
by one minute increments until the desired time
is reached.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
Climate Controls
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower
or increase the temperature inside the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This
is possible since outside air will always flow through
the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later
in this section.
Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats shown
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower
or increase the temperature inside the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing.
You can select different climate control settings for
the driver and passengers.
Set the passenger’s temperature setting to match the
driver’s temperature setting by pressing the passenger
power knob.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose
the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting.
If you choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top
of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load and also
turns on your headlamps.
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will
appear. The current delivery mode and fan speed will
also be displayed for approximately five seconds.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override
this delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
run when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will come on in recirculation.
O(Off): Press the driver’s side temperature knob to
turn off the climate control system. Outside air will
still enter the vehicle, and will be directed to the floor.
This direction can be changed by pressing the mode
button. The temperature can also be adjusted using
either temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows
on the fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO
button, driver’s side temperature knob, or the air
conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
)(Bi-Level): This mode allows for split air to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. The
flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between the
settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window vents. Cooler air is directed to
the upper vents and warmer air to the floor vents.
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
y9z(Fan): The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically
select Outside Air.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn
the system on.
Pressing either arrow while using automatic operation
will place the fan in manual operation. The fan
setting will display and the AUTO light will turn off.
The air delivery will remain in automatic operation.
-(Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
N(Mode): Press this button to manually change
the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired mode appears on
the display.
@(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light will come on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle.
It can be used to reduce outside air and odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculation may also help
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once the
temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside
temperature. The recirculation mode cannot be used
with floor, defrost, or defogging modes.
When the system is turned off, the display will go blank
after displaying the current status of the system.
H(Vent): This setting will deliver air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes,
the indicator will flash three times and turn off. The
air conditioning compressor will also come on when
this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode
the windows may fog when the weather is cold
and damp. To clear the fog, select either the blend
or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing
the button again, or turning off the engine.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount
of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
If your vehicle has heated seats or heated and cooled
Defogging and Defrosting
Air Conditioning
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to
clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When air
conditioning is selected, an indicator light will come on to
let you know that the air conditioning has been activated.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too
cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning
indicator flash three times and then turn off indicating
the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning
to be effective, the air conditioning light will turn off to let
you know the air conditioning mode has been canceled.
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog
or defrost modes.
-(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield,
floor outlets, and side window vents. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes
for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system
to operate more efficiently.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs a portion of the
air to the windshield, side window vents and some
to the floor vents. In this mode, the system will
automatically force outside air into your vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor will
run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Outlet Adjustment
Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and
on the side of the instrument panel that allow you
to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside
the vehicle. There are also air outlets on the rear
of the center console for rear seat passenger use.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the rotary knob
next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers.
For the most efficient airflow and temperature control,
keep the outlet in the fully opened position.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
< (Rear Window Defogger): The rear window
defogger will turn off automatically after it has been
activated. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
page 2-52.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know
when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow
this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save
you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be
alarmed when this happens.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer lets you see your vehicle’s speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer works together with the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The odometer mileage can be checked
without the vehicle running by pressing the Trip/Fuel
button on the instrument panel cluster. See “Odometer”
more information.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
For more information see “Trip Odometer” under
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would
only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled.
more information. The passenger safety belt light,
located on the instrument panel, will come on and
stay on for several seconds and then flash for
several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
on the ignition, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set the parking brake. If you
try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime
will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light will come on
briefly when you
start the engine.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light
still stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have antilock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you do not
have antilock brakes and there is a problem with your
regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-36
This warning light should
come on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system
and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® system
is active.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when
the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
information.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes
on briefly when the
engine is started.
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
Te n when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
If the indicator on the gage moves towards the shaded
in thermostat, it means that your engine coolant has
overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle
under normal driving conditions, you should pull off
the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed
up. This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
This can happen if you have recently replaced the
battery or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic
system is designed to evaluate critical emission
control systems during normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving. If you have done this
and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection
for lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that
might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will come
on briefly when you
start your engine.
If it does not, have
your vehicle serviced.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that
oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-26.
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
This light comes on
when the Tow/Haul
mode has been
activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
Fuel Gage
Highbeam On Light
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
for more information.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some situations you may experience with
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with
the fuel gage.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
in the center of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display the information that
was last displayed before the engine was turned off.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
displays available.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
DIC Operation and Displays
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. A digital speedometer also appears at
the bottom of the DIC display. The digital speedometer
can be enabled or disabled. See “DISPLAY DIGITAL
for more information.
The DIC displays information about your vehicle.
It also displays warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The DIC also allows some features to
be customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-57 for more information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions
are detailed in the
following pages.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3(Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
3(Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is
in the fuel tank. This is because different driving
conditions produce different fuel economies.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the
DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display
will return to zero.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Economy
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last
time this menu item was reset. To reset AVERAGE
ECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the
set/reset button while TIMER is displayed.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has
just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
this display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the
vehicle information will then be displayed in the
unit of measurement selected.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
Relearn Remote Key
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press
the vehicle information button again until the DIC
displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in
more information.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the
first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle
the key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
more information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine coolant protection
further information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
MANUAL SHIFT X
If your vehicle has Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
the shift lever is in the MANUAL MODE (M) position,
this message displays along with the current gear.
for more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel
information.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING ASSIST OFF
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
After the vehicle has been started, this message
displays to remind the driver that the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the
URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
information.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
page 3-45 for more information.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon
as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is
safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of
StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when the Road Sensing
Suspension (RSS) system is not operating properly.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
information.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit
wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to
free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-39. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-64 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left
off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn this light and message off.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment
windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
This message displays along with a continuous chime if
the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving
with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
TURN SIGNAL ON
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the
turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through
the available customizable options.
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
Feature Settings Menu Items
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
ITALIANO: All messages will appear in Italian.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
CHINESE: All messages will appear in Chinese.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s doors
will automatically lock. See Programmable Automatic
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors, including
the tailgate, will automatically lock when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors, including the tailgate,
will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
on page 2-5 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and tailgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and tailgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the tailgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key
must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You
can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
page 2-11 for more information.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay
on for 30 seconds.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the tailgate is closed.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPROACH LIGHTING
AUTO HIGH BEAMS
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select to
have the Intellibeam® system turned off or on. See
Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH
BEAMS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): The Intellibeam® system will be
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
turned off.
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON: The Intellibeam® system will be turned on.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt down when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY EXIT SEAT
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
This feature allows you to select your preference for the
automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat,
This feature allows you to select your preference for
the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory
information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
is removed from the ignition.
ON: The driver’s seat, and on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On
some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake
pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation
matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred,
and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it
again, the seat will stay in the original exit position,
unless a memory recall took place prior to removing
the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
OFF: The digital speedometer will be disabled.
ON (default): The digital speedometer will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED
This feature allows you to enable or disable the digital
speedometer on the DIC.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until DISPLAY DIGITAL
SPEED appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
{CAUTION:
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with
no selection made.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
more information.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Setting the Clock
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
1. Press the w (tune/select) knob (the passenger
side knob) to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the same knob until SET CLOCK displays.
3. Press this knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn this knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the same knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED displays.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP (display) is programmed into
one of the configurable keys, pressing the key switches
the display back to the clock set function. The time
and date always appears on the radio display.
See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” later in this
section for more information on configuring the keys.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Date
Radio(s)
1. Press the w knob (the passenger side knob)
to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the same knob until SET DATE displays.
3. Press this knob to select SET DATE.
4. Turn this knob to adjust the date.
5. Press the same knob to update the time.
VEHICLE DATE UPDATED displays.
If the DATE is programmed into one of the configurable
keys, pressing the key switches the display back to
the date set function. The time and date always appears
on the radio display. See “Configurable Radio Display
Keys” later in this section for more information on
configuring the keys.
Radio with CD and DVD
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on and off.
Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off
the radio, RSE (Rear Seat Entertainment) video screen,
and RSA (Rear Seat Audio).
n (Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or to decrease the volume.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn AudioPilot® off, press the w knob to enter
the main menu, turn this knob until VNC:AUDIOPILOT
appears, and press this knob. The X in the box
disappears when it is turned off. For additional
information on AudioPilot®, visit
SRCE (Source): Press to select a source, either radio,
CD, DVD, or auxiliary, if your vehicle has this feature.
The CD or DVD must be loaded to select the source and
to play. CD or DVD displays if a disc is loaded. If a
CD or DVD is not loaded, the display changes to the
auxiliary source, if your vehicle has this feature, or
continue to play the radio.
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
Finding a Station
Vehicle Noise Compensation (VNC): Your vehicle has
a Bose® audio system. It includes Bose AudioPilot®
noise compensation technology. When turned on,
AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for background noise,
so that the audio always sounds the same at the set
volume level.
BAND: Press to select AM, FM1, FM2, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped).
w (Tune/Select): Turn to select radio stations.
©¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the previous
station and stay there. Press the right arrow to go to
the next station and stay there. The sound mutes while
seeking.
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
the music is being heard through the audio system.
At higher volume settings, where the music is much
louder than the background noise, there might be little
or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
©¨(Scan): Press the arrows to enter scan mode.
SCAN displays. Press the arrows to scan to the
next station. The radio goes to a station, plays for
five seconds, and then goes on to the next station.
Press the arrows again to stop scanning.
Turn the AudioPilot® on by pressing the w (tune/
select) knob to enter the main menu. Then turn this
knob until VNC:AUDIOPILOT displays. Press this knob
to turn AudioPilot® on and off. An X appears in the box
while it is on.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the arrows for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds and PSCAN
displays. The radio goes to the first preset station, plays
for five seconds, and then goes to the next preset station.
Press the arrows again to stop scanning presets.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2, and
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2, or XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature the
radio can be set to search for local stations or stations
that are further away, for a larger selection. To set
this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the
following steps:
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for two seconds until a beep sounds.
The set preset station number displays above
the pushbutton that is set. When that numbered
pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds,
the station that was set, returns.
1. Press the w (tune/select) knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn this knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK
DISTANT displays.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3. Press this knob again to select either LOCAL or
DISTANT.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP (Digital Signal Processing) setting,
or a PTY (program type) setting, see each of these
features later in this section. Once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station
remembers each setting and it remains active, until
the setting is turned off for that preset station.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
To search for stations, press the seek arrows. If
the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK displays and the
radio seeks stations only with strong signals. If the
system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK displays and the
radio seeks stations with weak and strong signals.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature enables the
radio to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for local stations and AWAY can be
for stations available outside of the local broadcast
area. To set preset stations for home and away perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, or FM2.
3. Press the w (tune/select) knob to enter the
main menu.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
4. Turn this knob until AUTOSTORE PRESETS
displays.
2. Turn this knob until PRESETS HOME/AWAY
displays.
5. Press this knob again to select. AUTOSTORE
displays. The radio automatically searches the
band and selects and stores the six radio stations
with the strongest signal. The stations are stored by
signal strength, not sequential order. The set
preset station number displays above the
pushbutton that is set.
3. Press this knob again to select. HOME or AWAY
displays.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home
and away.
6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
This function does not work with XM™.
When battery power is removed and later applied, the
radio presets do not have to be reset.
This function does not work with XM™.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
2. Turn this knob until BASS – MID – TREBLE
displays.
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the following
steps:
3. Press this knob to scroll through the settings.
4. Turn this knob again to increase or to decrease the
bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
has static, decrease the treble.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until BALANCE – FADER displays.
3. Press this knob to enter the tone settings.
5. Press this knob to set the adjustment.
4. Press this knob again to scroll to BALANCE or
FADER.
6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
5. Turn this knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right
or the left speakers and the FADER to the front or
the rear speakers.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature lets you select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
6. Press this knob again to set the adjustment.
7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until EQUALIZER displays.
EQ0 does not display while in this mode.
3. Press this knob again to set the equalization
setting. The equalization setting displays.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP): This feature is used
to provide a choice of different listening experiences.
To choose a DSP setting, perform the following steps:
• Driver: Select this setting to adjust the audio for the
driver to receive the best possible sound quality.
• 5.1 Surround: Select this setting to turn on true 5.1
surround sound processing, available for DVD-A
or DVD-V sources that were recorded in 5.1
Surround. This setting is only available if the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) control is turned off.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until DSP displays.
3. Press this knob again to set the DSP setting.
The DSP setting displays.
5.1 Surround + Normal — Select this mode for
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
the best audio for all seating positions.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The DSP settings available are:
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During
your trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not
in your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact
XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100
in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
in Canada.
• Normal: Select this setting for normal mode.
It provides the best sound quality for all seating
positions.
• Centerpoint®: Select this setting to enable Bose
Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® signal processing
gives surround sound quality for a CD, MP3, or a
DVD stereo audio source. Centerpoint® delivers
five independent audio channels from conventional
stereo recordings.
• Rear: Select this setting to adjust the audio for the
rear seat passengers to receive the best possible
sound quality.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
4 (Information): Press while in XM™ mode to
retrieve additional text information related to the
current XM™ station such as: Channel, Song, Artist,
and CAT (category). To view this information, perform
the following:
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency.
RDS stations can also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name of the
program being broadcast.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until INFO (information) displays.
3. Press this knob again to select INFO. The display
changes to show the additional XM™ information.
The RDS function does not work with XM™.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
RDS Messages
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
current radio station or a related network station,
ALERT displays. The announcement should be heard,
even if the volume is low or a CD or DVD is playing.
If a CD or DVD is playing, play stops during the
announcement. Alert announcements cannot be turned
off. If the radio tunes to a related network station for
the announcement, it returns to the original station
when the announcement ends.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies.
ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
• Display messages from radio stations.
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG displays. The message displays
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the
entire message does not display, parts of the message
appear every three seconds until the message is
completed. Once the completed message has displayed,
MSG disappears from the display until a new message
is received.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA displays, it means
the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it seeks to a station that does.
When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is
found, the radio stops seeking and TA displays. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
No Traffic displays.
To display the last message, perform the following
steps:
The radio plays traffic announcements even if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD or
DVD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until RECALL RDS MESSAGE
displays.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE displays.
3. Press this knob again until the message displays.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG
disappears from the display until another new message
is received.
3. Press this knob again to select ON or OFF.
An X appears in the box when ON is selected.
TP (Traffic Program): TP displays when the radio
detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic
announcement broadcast capability.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the BACK (F6) button or wait for the display
to time out.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows
the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type.
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
PTY lets you search for stations with specific types of
music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY, TALK,
CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until ALTERNATE FREQ. displays.
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
3. Press this knob again to select AF OFF, AF ON,
or AF REG (regular). When AF is selected an
X appears in that box.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until PROGRAM TYPE MODE
displays.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the BACK (F6) button or wait for the display
to time out.
3. Press this knob again to select ON or OFF.
An X appears in the box when ON is selected.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the BACK (F6) button or wait for the display
to time out.
This function does not work with XM™.
Radio Message
Once program type is activated the PTYs displays
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset stations
(if programmed). Press the pushbutton for the
desired PTY. The radio might not go to all of the
stations with that music type when pressing the
pushbutton, as not all stations support PTYs.
THEFTLOCK: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has activated. Take the vehicle
to the dealer/retailer for service.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When INSERT displays, insert a CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Do not load a CD until INSERT displays. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six. If you want to load less than six CDs,
load the desired amount. The CD player times
out when it does not receive any more CDs and the
last CD loaded begins to play.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset stations,
if programmed.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded begins to play
automatically.
M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Care of Your CDs
To insert one CD, do the following:
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD and DVD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a
CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the M button.
Please Wait displays.
3. When INSERT displays, insert a CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, CD displays. The number of the
CD and the track number also displays if the radio is on.
If the radio is on, the CD begins to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the M button for two seconds.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Please Wait displays and a beep sounds.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
quickly within the track. Holding this button plays in
reverse at 10 times the normal speed. After holding it for
more than four seconds it plays in reverse at 20 times
the normal speed. Release to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press and hold to advance
quickly within the track. Holding this button plays at
10 times the normal speed. After holding it for more than
four seconds it plays at 20 times the normal speed.
Release to play the passage. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
F5 MODE: Press to select from NORMAL, RPT TRCK
(Repeat Track), RPT DISC (Repeat CD), RDM TRCK
(Random Track), and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).
• Normal: Sets the system for normal play of
the CD(s).
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and
advance to the next mode.
F1 DISC n(Down): Press to go to the previous CD.
F2 DISC m(Up): Press to go to the next CD.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over
again. RPT DISC displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and
advance to the next mode.
©¨(Scan): Press the arrows to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, and then goes to the next track. Press the
arrows again to stop scanning.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential
order. RDM TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off random play and
advance to the next mode.
SRCE (Source): Press to select a source, either radio,
CD, DVD or AUX (auxiliary), if your vehicle has this
feature. The CD must be loaded to select the source and
to play. CD appears on the display if a CD is loaded.
If a CD is not loaded, the display changes to the
next available source, either DVD, AUX, if your vehicle
has this feature, or radio.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential order.
RDM ALL displays. Press the MODE pushbutton
again to turn off random play and advance to
the next mode.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD that is currently
playing, or press and hold to eject all of the CDs
loaded. A beep sounds. Eject can be activated with the
ignition or radio off. If the CD is not removed after a
short time, the CD is pulled back into the CD player
for storage.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to display CD PLAY MODE.
© ¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track. Press it again to go to the previous
track, or press the right arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Pressing either arrow for more than
two seconds searches the previous or next tracks at
two tracks per second. Release to stop searching and
to play the track.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on how to play
later in this section.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Using the DVD Player
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in. If the ignition and the radio are on,
the CD or DVD begins playing. A DVD can be loaded
with the radio off, but it does not start playing until
the radio is on, and sourced to DVD. The DVD player
can be controlled by the buttons on the radio, the
RSA (Rear Seat Audio) system, and the remote
control, if your vehicle has this feature. See the Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-91
for more information. A DVD icon displays whenever
a disc is loaded. The DVD player can also be run
for passengers in the rear seat with the radio off. The
rear seat passenger can power on the video screen
and use the remote control to navigate the disc.
page 3-91 for more information.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The DVD player is capable of playing both DVD video
and DVD audio discs. This DVD player includes Dolby®
Digital Decoding*, and DTS® Decoding**, so discs
can be played that were recorded using these
technologies.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby®, and the double-D symbol are registered
trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
DVD Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
**DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the DVD or CD. Eject can
be activated with the ignition or radio off. If the disc
is not removed after a short time, the disc is pulled back
into the DVD player for storage.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code. The region code is printed on
the jacket of most DVDs.
• The region code on your DVD might not be correct
for your region.
DVD video, DVD audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD + R/RW
are fully supported by this DVD player. In addition,
standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, video CD, SACD,
MP3, and WMA formatted discs are fully supported.
If a disc is inserted that is not supported, an error
message displays and the disc is ejected.
• The format of the disc might not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” later in this section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the disc.
• The label could be caught in the DVD player.
If the disc is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good disc.
When a DVD is inserted, the DVD functions display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset stations.
These functions vary based on the type of disc that
is inserted. Loading the disc can take some time as the
DVD player reads the disc and determines the type.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F6 (Menu): Press to go to the DVD root menu and to
bring up the menu navigation arrows. Pressing keys
F1 through F4 moves the cursor to navigate the DVD
menu. Press F6 to enter your selection.
Playing a DVD Video
F1 (Play/Pause): Press to turn on the video screen,
if your vehicle has this feature, and begin playing
the DVD. Press to pause the DVD if it is playing. Press
Play (F1) to restart the DVD if it is paused.
©¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current chapter. Press it again to go to the
previous chapter, or press the right arrow to go to the
next chapter. Press and hold to change chapter at a rate
of one per second.
F2 (Stop): Press once to stop the DVD and retain the
current position. Press it again from the stopped
state to return to the beginning of the disc.
F3 (Reverse): Press and hold, if the DVD is playing,
to enter fast reverse mode. Hold to play in reverse
at four times the normal speed. Hold it for more than
four seconds to play in reverse at 32 times the normal
speed. Release to return to normal play mode.
w (Tune/Select): Turn to the left one notch to go
to the start of the current chapter. Turn it again to go to
the previous chapter, or turn to the right one notch to
go to the next chapter.
INFO: Press the programmed INFO soft key, or press
F4 (Forward): If the DVD player is playing, press and
hold to enter fast forward mode. Hold to play at
four times the normal speed. Hold it for more than
four seconds to play at 32 times the normal speed.
Release to return to normal play mode.
the w (tune/select) knob and turn until INFO is
shown, and then press the tune/select knob. Pressing
INFO brings up the Information display. It shows
the current Title number, Chapter number and elapsed
time of the DVD, and additional menu items.
Press and hold, if the DVD is playing, to enter slow
forward mode. Hold to play at half the normal speed.
Hold it for more than four seconds to play at an
eighth the normal speed. Release to return to the
pause state.
• F1 SUB: Press to view the Subtitle Language Menu.
• F2 ANGLE: Press to view the Angle Menu.
• F6 BACK: Press to return to the previous screen.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F5 MODE: Press to select from NORMAL, and
RPT TRCK (repeat track).
Playing a DVD Audio Disc
Not all DVD audio discs are recorded to industry
standards and for this reason might not play properly
in your vehicle.
• Normal: Sets the system for normal play of
the DVD.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track
over again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the
MODE button again to turn off repeat play and
advance to the next mode.
F1 (Play/Pause): Press to pause the DVD if it is
playing. Press Play (F1) to restart the DVD if it is
paused.
F2 (Stop): Press once to stop the DVD and retain
the current position. Press it again from the stopped
state to return to the beginning of the disc.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to display DVD PLAY MODE.
©¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track. Press it again to go to the previous track,
or press the right arrow to go to the next track. Press and
hold to change tracks at a rate of one per second.
F3 (Reverse): Press and hold, if the DVD player
is playing, to enter fast reverse mode. Hold to play in
reverse at four times the normal speed. Hold it for more
than four seconds to play in reverse at 32 times the
normal speed. Release to return to normal play mode.
w (Tune/Select): Turn to the left one notch to go to
the start of the current track. Turn it again to go to the
previous track, or turn to the right one notch to go to the
next track.
F4 (Forward): Press and hold, if the DVD player is
playing, to enter fast forward mode. Hold to play
at four times the normal speed. Hold it for more than
four seconds to play at 32 times the normal speed.
Release to return to normal play mode.
If your vehicle has Rear Seat Audio (RSA), you can view
the menu and the playlist can be viewed from the DVD
audio disc on the video screen. Turn on the video screen
with the power button on the remote control to view
and navigate the menu and playlists. See Rear Seat
information.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to display CD PLAY MODE.
Playing a CD in the DVD Drive
F3 (Reverse): Press and hold to enter fast reverse
mode. Hold to play in reverse at four times the normal
speed. Hold it for more than four seconds to play in
reverse at 32 times the normal speed. Release to return
to normal play mode.
©¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track. Press it again to go to the previous
track, or press the right arrow to go to the next
track. Press and hold to change tracks at a rate of
one per second.
F4 (Forward): Press and hold to enter fast forward
mode. Hold to play at four times the normal speed. Hold
it for more than four seconds to play at 32 times the
normal speed. Release to return to normal play mode.
w (Tune/Select): Turn to the left one notch to go to
the start of the current track. Turn it again to go to the
previous track, or turn to the right one notch to go to the
next track.
F5 MODE: Press to select from NORMAL, RPT
TRCK, and RDM TRCK.
© ¨(Scan): Press the arrows to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, and then goes to the next track. Press the
arrows again to stop scanning.
• Normal: Sets the system for normal play of
the DVD.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and
advance to the next mode.
If your vehicle has Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), you
can view the track details from your CD on the video
screen. Turn on the video screen with the power button
on the remote control to view and navigate the tracks.
page 3-91 for more information.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current DVD in random, rather than sequential
order. RDM TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off random play and
advance to the next mode.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the configurable radio display keys,
perform the following steps:
Using the AUX Display (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE),
an AUX screen appears as the SRCE (source) key is
pressed. When AUX is selected in the front, the audio
from the device plugged into the auxiliary jacks in the
rear can be played over the vehicle speakers. Select
between AUX and DVD video on the video screen while
listening to AUX audio. See Rear Seat Entertainment
the auxiliary jacks.
1. Press the knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the w knob until SETUP displays.
3. Press this knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn this knob until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
displays.
5. Press this knob again to enter into CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS.
6. Turn this knob to select which of the four
configurable keys to be changed. The currently
assigned feature shows on the display.
SRCE (Source): Press to select the AUX display.
F2 (DVD): Press to select DVD video on the video
screen in the rear, with AUX audio on the vehicle
speakers.
7. Press this knob to select the configurable key to
change.
8. Turn this knob to find the feature that you would
like to store to the key.
F5 (AUX): Press to select AUX video on the video
screen in the rear, with AUX audio on the vehicle
speakers.
9. Press this knob again when the feature to be stored
is found. The display updates and shows the symbol
of the selected feature next to the configurable key.
Configurable Radio Display Keys
This feature lets you customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to
make it easier to adjust the radio features.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature
does not display when programming the remaining
configurable keys. The configurable keys can be
changed at any time.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using
no file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders
in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a
minimum in order to keep down the complexity and
confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
99 folders and playlists the player can access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are ignored.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them, the
player advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files and the empty
folder does not display.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
99 folders and playlists. Long file names, folder names,
or playlist names can use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist names.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions not function on a CD that was recorded
without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, the radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks are played in the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to
their numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the
first track of the first folder or root directory.
When a CD is inserted, CD displays, the number of the
CD and the track number displays if the radio is on.
If the radio is on, the CD begins to play automatically.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (repeat track), and RDM TRCK
(random track).
• Normal: Sets the system for normal play of the DVD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance
to the next mode.
F3 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to enter
fast reverse mode. Hold the pushbutton to play in
reverse at four times the normal speed. Hold it for more
than four seconds to play in reverse at 32 times the
normal speed. Release the pushbutton to return
to normal play mode.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current DVD in random, rather than sequential
order. RDM TRCK appears on the display. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and
advance to the next mode.
A quick press of this pushbutton goes to the beginning
of the previous folder.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display
the time of the track. Press this pushbutton again
to display CD PLAY MODE.
F4 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to enter
fast forward mode. Hold the pushbutton to play at
four times the normal speed. Hold it for more than
four seconds to play at 32 times the normal speed.
Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode.
© or ¨(Seek): Press the left seek arrow to go to
the start of the current track. Press it again to go to the
previous track, or press the right seek arrow to go to
the next track. Press and hold these buttons to change
tracks at a rate of one per second.
A quick press of this pushbutton advances to the
next folder.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TUNE/SEL Knob: Turn to the left one notch to go to
the start of the current track. Turn it again to go to
the previous track, or turn to the right one notch to
go to the next track.
4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that
specific information.
• F1 TTLE (Title): Displays the title name.
• F2 ATST (Artist): Displays the artist name.
• F3 ALBM (Album): Displays the album name.
• F4 FLDR (Folder): Displays the folder name.
© ¨(Scan): Press the scan arrows to listen to each
track for 10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays
for 10 seconds, and then goes to the next track.
Press the scan arrows again to stop scanning.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment, you can
view the menu and playlist from your CD on the video
screen. Turn on the video screen with the power
button on the remote control to view and navigate the
menu and playlists. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,
either radio, CD, DVD, or AUX (auxiliary), if your
vehicle has this feature. The CD must be loaded to
select the source and to play. CD displays if a CD is
loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display changes to the
next available source, either DVD, AUX, if your vehicle
has this feature, or radio.
4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3 CD
is loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album, or Folder
names. To view this information, perform the following:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until INFO displays.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject can
be activated with the ignition and the radio off. If the
CD is not removed after a short time, the CD pulls back
into the CD player for storage.
3. Press this knob again to select INFO. The display
changes to show the additional MP3 information.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Info: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
NotFound: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
XM Lock: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label
is needed to activate the service.
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Control of the Audio System
Navigation/Radio System
The driver has basic control of the whole audio system.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
Press and hold the O(power) knob for more than
two seconds to turn off the radio, RSE (rear seat
entertainment), and the RSA (rear seat audio).
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your
own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, see the
Navigation System manual for more information.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works
with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player
is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes
a radio with a DVD player, a video display screen,
and if your vehicle has a third row seat, it could have
a second video display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, and a remote control.
the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The operating range
for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until
the temperature is within the operating range of
the RSE system.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a third row video screen display,
it has two additional headphones.
Headphones
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator
light does not come on, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch the headphones
to Off when not in use.
The infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and the RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
3 minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated
to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections. These headphones are used to listen to
media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any
auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary
input jack, if your vehicle has this feature. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch,
and a volume control.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right)
appears on the upper right side, above the ear pad
and should be positioned on the right ear.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables (not included) may
be required to connect the auxiliary device to the
A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
proper usage.
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A)
is for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the
left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right
audio input.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode,
pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control
switches the video screen from the DVD player mode
to the auxiliary device. The radio plays the audio of the
connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level. Higher levels
of volume decreases audio distortion.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the
wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
“Headphones” earlier in this section for more information.
It is always best to power your portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if your
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be selected
as an audio source on the RSA system. See Rear Seat
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, perform the following:
When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if your vehicle has this feature, or A/V jacks,
the rear seat passengers are be able to hear audio
from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the
remote control.
2. Use the remote control Q, R, q, rnavigation
arrows and the r button to use the setup menu.
3. Press the z menu button again to remove
the setup menu from the screen.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries may need to
be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of sight can also affect
the function of the remote control.
1. Push the release button located on the
overhead console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into
its locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject
the disc to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
page 3-68 for more information.
The overhead console contains the IR transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for
the remote control. They are located at the rear of
the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area
or in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage
in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control
uses a code set of Toshiba®.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main menu
of the DVD. This function can vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
Q, R, q, r (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press to select the choice that is
highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust the brightness,
screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display
the language menu.
O(Power): Press to turn the video screen on and off.
q(Return): Press to exit the current active menu and
return to the previous menu. This button operates only
when the display menu or a DVD menu is active.
P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control
backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after
7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c(Stop): Press to stop playing, fast reversing,
or fast forwarding a DVD. Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
r(Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the DVD or
CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the
play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a DVD audio
or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
s(Play/Pause): Press to start playing a DVD.
Press while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press again
to continue playing the DVD.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD or
CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the
play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release the fast forward button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,
you might be able to do slow play by pressing the
play/pause button then pressing the fast forward button.
The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. You
can also, depending on the radio, perform reverse slow
play by pressing the play/pause button and then
pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play
mode, press the play/pause button.
e (Audio): Press to change audio tracks on DVDs
that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for each
disc.
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter. Press again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to
move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function varies for
each disc.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the beginning
of the next chapter or track. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch the system between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
\ (Clear): Press within three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.
If your vehicle has a third row video screen, the
AUX button controls the source display on the
second row video screen, and the third row video
screen as described in the table below:
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter
or track numbers greater than 9. Press this button
before entering the number.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Aux Button
Press
Default State
(No Press)
Second Row
Screen
Third Row
Screen
DVD Media
DVD Media
Aux Video
Source
Aux Video
Source
Aux Video
Source
First Press
Second Press
Third Press
DVD Media
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Aux Video
Source
Return to
Default State
DVD Media
Return to
Default State
Fourth Press
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
d (Camera): Press to change camera angles on DVDs
that have this feature when a DVD is playing. The format
and content of this function varies for each disc.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track number
selection.
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the
it looks stretched out.
remote control.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
picture moves or scrolls.
The remote control
does not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Check that the RSE
video screen is sourced
to the DVD player.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture
or sound.
pressed one time, the
DVD player resumes
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed
two times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE
video screen is in the
auxiliary source mode.
Check the auxiliary
input connections at
both devices.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
DVD Distortion
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio you have. The video screen might display
one of the following:
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up,
or if the disc is damaged.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when Z or DVD AUX is pressed
on the radio.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage can result.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature lets rear seat passengers listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. The rear seat passengers
can control the same music sources the front seat
passengers are listening to (dual control) or a different
source. For example, rear seat passengers can
control and listen to a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume
for each set of headphones.
The RSA functions can be used even when the main
radio is off. The front audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear
from the display when it is off.
P(Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If your
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left headphones and the right knob controls
the right headphones.
The front audio system allows the rear speakers to
continue playing even when the RSA audio is active
through the headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the
RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the front
auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the enter menu function.
While listening to a disc, press the right seek arrow to
go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the
left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track
or chapter (if more than 10 seconds have played).
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or
LOCKED could display.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
the left or right seek arrow to perform a cursor up
or down on the menu. Hold the left or right seek arrow
to perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the
next preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD/DVD is playing, press the down or up arrow
to go to the next or to the previous track or chapter.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle has audio
steering wheel controls,
they may differ depending
on your vehicle’s options.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired headphones,
if your vehicle has these features, does not mute.
Press and release this button again, to turn the
sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
Press and hold this button for longer than one second
to interact with the OnStar® system. If your vehicle
also has the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®
this manual for more information.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to
go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨(Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped).
Press the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek
arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD
or DVD changer, if multiple discs are loaded.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may
display No Signl to indicate interference.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you
drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of being
killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person
had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of
a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between your
vehicle and others is important.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the
weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on.
This is normal.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
feel the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this
is normal.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Locking Differential
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking differential
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the wheels has no traction and
the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the
system working. This is normal and does not mean there
is a problem with your vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak®
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak® system has not been turned off
using the StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to
the three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s),
your vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not
clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait
15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset the
system. If any of these messages still appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more information on the DIC
messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-45.
Road Sensing Suspension
The Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature provides
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
engaged, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better ride
and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak®
system which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The StabiliTrak® light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
system is both on and
activated.
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if not
automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management system. See
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
you may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be turned
off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if
both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak®) were
previously on. To disable both traction control and
StabiliTrak®, press and hold the button for five seconds.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each
individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak® light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If you turn off traction control, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the
driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate constantly.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle,
you should see your dealer for service.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
at all times. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no
separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front
axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
more information.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
Steering
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places. You
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass.
Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Off-Road Driving
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make it
much better suited for off-road use than a conventional
passenger car. Its higher ground clearance also helps
your vehicle step over some off-road obstacles. But your
vehicle does not have features like special underbody
shielding and a transfer case low gear range, things that
are usually thought necessary for extended or severe
off-road service. This guide is for operating your vehicle
off paved roads.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
The following steps must be performed on the bolts and
snap features to remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the
snap features and disengage the snaps.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until
it is free.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no road
signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
In short, you have gone right back to nature.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide. You will
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam.
1. Line up the snap features and push the air dam
rearward to engage the snaps.
The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snap
features are accessible from underneath the front fascia.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Go Off-Roading
CAUTION: (Continued)
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly
attached. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be?
What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
You will find other important information in this manual.
on page 5-54.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
{CAUTION:
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet, and body, you will need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is
to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
• You approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what is not.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected
by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking. See Drunk
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as
well or at all.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you may not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
{CAUTION:
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you need,
because you do not want the wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
• Use the headlamps even during the day. They
make your vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some things you should do if the vehicle
stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up
the hill:
There are also some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back straight down.
• If the engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
your vehicle, it is steep enough to cause you to roll
over if you turn around. If you cannot make it up the
hill, you must back straight down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put the
transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if
it rolled downhill.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you will be able to tell if the wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you
back down the hill with the wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Downhill
{CAUTION:
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large
rocks?
There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them, you
could lose control and have a serious accident:
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and they
will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping
your vehicle under control at all times.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep
to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you do not drive straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
The brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going
uphill. But if it happens when going downhill:
Here are some things to consider:
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
{CAUTION:
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
When driving across an incline that is not too steep, the
vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out
the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk
the course” so you know what the surface is like before
you drive it.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you will need longer braking
distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not
get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get
the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe is
under water, you will never be able to start the engine.
When you go through water, remember that when the
brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
Driving in Water
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the ground from
under your tires, and you could lose traction
and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle and
other vehicle parts.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
{CAUTION:
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
• Allow extra following distance.
Have up-to-date maps?
• Pass with caution.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth,
and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you
will be driving under severe conditions, include a small
bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap
bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
CAUTION: (Continued)
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. For vehicles with
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the system
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning
before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. Or, you can use recovery hooks, if your
vehicle has them. If your vehicle does need to be towed
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recovery Hooks
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight
of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Certification/
Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)
in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-61.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later
in this section.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading
information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the
center line.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck
could shift forward and come into the
passenger area, injuring you and others.
If you put things in the bed of your truck,
you should make sure they are properly
secured.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, they will keep going.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Equipment
connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower
the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle
height. The system is activated when the
ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically
adjust vehicle height thereafter. The system
may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned
to LOCK. You may hear the air compressor
operating when the height is being adjusted.
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you can
carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your
vehicle before you buy and install the new
equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate,
thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the
height. See “Weight Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches” under Towing a Trailer
on page 4-43.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It
does not include the weight of the people inside.
But you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for
each seat.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended
to carry a slide-in type camper.
Automatic Level Control
Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to your vehicle can damage it, and
the repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not install a slide-in camper or
similar equipment on your vehicle.
The automatic level control rear suspension
comes as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well
as better handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions. An air compressor
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing
All-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with any of the
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
Autoride®
Recreational Vehicle Towing
The Autoride® feature provides improved vehicle ride
and handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and
“dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul mode that,
when activated, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the
instructions in this section and check with your
dealer/retailer for more information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
{CAUTION:
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/Haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow
a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t
make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine
and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that Tow/Haul
mode has been selected.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every
time it is started.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Press the button at the end of the shift lever to
enable/disable the Tow/Haul mode.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following chart to determine how much your
vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch
device on your vehicle could damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch
device on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
*GCWR
AWD 6.2L
3.42
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See
information.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to
a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to
the maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself,
as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear
axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may
add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and
400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle
now weighs:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t
go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight
distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only
way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
Trailer Brakes
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond
the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at higher altitudes
will boil at a lower temperature than at or near sea level.
If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at
high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may
show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked (preferably on level
ground) with the automatic transmission in PARK (P)
for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If you
do get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-26.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking on Hills
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
{CAUTION:
• start your engine,
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill
or underfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red w/ Black Stripe: Battery Feed*
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to the rear
bumper beam. It is located next to the integrated
trailer hitch.
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your dealer or
a qualified service technician.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press
the tow/haul mode button located at the end of the shift
lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage and
properly charge the battery.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the
weight of the people inside, but you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load must
not be more than your vehicles CWR.
These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The red/black stripe power feed will not be connected
to the battery until the ring terminal is unstowed and
connected to the underhood electrical center. The
instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the
data link connector for the trailer brake controller.
The harness contains the following wires:
Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so that
you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
• Dark Blue: Auxiliary
• Red/Black: Battery
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Gasoline Octane
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the
octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-50 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap
on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate
the secondary hood release, near the center of
the grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full
open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of
the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close
the hood.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
on page 5-111.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
on page 5-40.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND) (Out of View).
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
I
of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those oils
that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M
and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may
not be available. You can add substitute oil designated
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil change.
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every
time the oil is changed.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so
it can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned
on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
the location of the engine
air cleaner/filter and the air
filter restriction indicator, if
the vehicle has one.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,
it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter
needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction
indicator at every oil change and replace the engine
air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer,
a service station, or a local recycling center for help.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
1. Locate the
air cleaner/filter
assembly.
See Engine
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
on page 5-12.
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine
air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When you have the engine air cleaner/filter
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt.
If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with
dirt, a new filter is required.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle
has one, by pressing the top button on the indicator.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If you
suspect a small leak, then use the following checking
procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a
large leak, then it may be necessary to have the
vehicle towed to a dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare your vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to PARK (P).
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
page 6-13.
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
on page 5-12 for more
information.
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
Cold Check Procedure
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated
safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The
hot check procedure is the most accurate method
to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure
at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure
to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is
between 80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of
the engine compartment, on the passenger side
of the vehicle.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the
first opportunity in order to verify the cold check.
The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it
is important to ensure the transmission temperature
is within range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the COLD band. It does not take
much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L).
Do not overfill.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
on page 5-12 for more
information.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the
transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedures described. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutes or longer to
obtain an accurate reading because of residual
fluid draining down the dipstick tube. If inconsistent
readings persist, check the transmission breather to be
sure it is clean and not clogged. If readings are still
inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-26.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
{CAUTION:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you do not need to add anything else.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even
a little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If the vehicle has an air conditioner and it is on,
turn it off.
2. Turn on the heater to the highest temperature and
at the highest fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message,
along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle immediately.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
engine-driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal
idle speed for at least five minutes while parked.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
electric cooling fan, idle the engine for five minutes
while parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Check
the coolant level after the system cools down. Some
amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a
leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap by
slowly turning the pressure cap counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has electric cooling fans. You might hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans can turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the
air conditioning system, the fans can change to
high speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system
is functioning properly. The fans change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing in an area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the
DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The
message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each
ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID message displays, you will need to add washer
fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down,
you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the
following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed.
This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the negative
battery cable attaches.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal,
it is located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more light.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with
the dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
vehicle has one.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover,
if the vehicle has one, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
If your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive,
be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in
this section. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care
not to overtighten the plug.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain
level. When checking the fluid level on any axle,
variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill
differences between the minimum and the maximum
fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven
before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle
tubes and has not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid
level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an
hour or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly
must be supported to get a true reading.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
The proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch
(1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
What to Use
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall or other flat surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall or other flat surface.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you,
this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
• Have the tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
2. Locate the center
of the projector
lens of the
low-beam
headlamp.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall
the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the
center of the projector lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
To replace one of these bulbs:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
A. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
B. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
C. Back-up Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
for more information.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the
License Plate Lamp
two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to remove.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the
taillamp assembly and turn the bulb socket
clockwise until it clicks.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
bulb socket.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
7441
168
License Plate Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly, do the following:
194
Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Turn Signal Lamp
3057
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away
from the windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and rotate the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your tire warranty
and where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22-Inch Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle has the optional 22-inch
P285/45R22 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on-road use.
The low-profile, wide tread design is not
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by
a sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
recommended for off-road driving. See Off-Road
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into
the sidewall. The following illustration is an
example of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
75, as shown in item C of the light truck
(LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that
the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts
of a tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel
in inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-61.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
page 4-35.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-35.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which
a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See
“Tire and Loading Information Label” under
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-70.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P285/45R22 size
tires and you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, set the cold inflation
pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above the recommended tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Label. When you end this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Loading Your
on page 5-61.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
for additional information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
instrument panel cluster.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
and Loading Information label and its location on
page 5-61.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning
light and the DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the
correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure
levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-71.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-35.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle might not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types could also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
additional information.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare
than the road tires (those originally installed on
your vehicle). When new, your vehicle included
a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar
overall diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and
wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. Because
this spare was developed for use on your
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
information on proper tire rotation.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable level
of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove
the device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the rear tires.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
training. The jack provided with your vehicle
is designed only for changing a flat tire.
If it is used for anything else, you or others
could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle
slips off the jack. Use the jack provided with
your vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
{CAUTION:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a
cover near the passenger side rear seat.
Rear Seat (Passenger Side) Jack Cover
1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing
nuts one-quarter turn counterclockwise and
pulling the jack cover off.
The following information tells you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (G)
by turning the knob (B) on the jack counterclockwise
to lower the jack head (F) from the mounting
bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to the jack (E)
by turning the wing nut (C) counterclockwise. Place
the wheel blocks where needed as indicated in
previously in this section.
The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the
passenger’s side top-box storage unit.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side top-box
storage unit. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if
for more information.
2. Remove the black pouch from the storage box.
You now have all of the tools you will need to
lower the spare tire and change a flat.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Knob
C. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Jack Head
G. Mounting Bracket
D. Retaining Hook
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the spare tire:
2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and then pull.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and
wheel wrench (H) as shown.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer I. Jack Handle Extension(s)
E. Hoist Shaft J. Spare Tire Lock
1. Open the hoist shaft access cover on the bumper
to access the spare tire lock (J).
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the open end
of the extension (F)
through the hole in
the rear bumper (G)
(hoist shaft
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-90 for more information.
access hole).
6. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you,
to assist in reaching
the spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end (F) of the extension connects
to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Tilt the tire with slack in the cable to access the
tire/wheel retainer (D). Separate the retainer from
the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin
while pressing down on the latch. When the
retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel
along with the cable and guide pin.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. To remove the center cap, place the chiseled end
of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry the cap out.
The tools that are needed include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the wheel
wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B) and
only one jack handle extension (C). Attach the wheel
wrench (D) to the jack handle extension (C). Attach
the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire near the front body
mount (E) as shown. Turn the wheel wrench (D)
clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there is enough room for
the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
6. Take off the flat tire.
Rear Position
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of
the vehicle, use the jack handle (B) and both jack
handle extensions (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D)
to the jack handle extensions (C). Attach the
jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking
pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Install the spare tire.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts until the
wheel is held against the hub.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
and spare wheel.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Tighten the
nuts firmly in a
{CAUTION:
crisscross sequence
as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you
must also reinstall the center cap. Line the tab on the
back of the tab with the slot in the wheel. Place the
cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not visible
proceed to Step 6.
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-94.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-79.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the jack (A) on
the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so
that the jack is
balanced securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until
it lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging
by the cable.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you
or on either side of you as you pull the jack
out from under the spare.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and
pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire
out from under the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in
the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up
if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up can damage
the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extension(s)
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
J. Spare Tire Lock
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
1. Put the tire (A) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tilt the tire. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D)
from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the
center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through
the center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I)
and wheel wrench (H) as shown.
4. Insert the open end
of the extension (F)
through the hole in
the rear bumper (G)
(hoist shaft
access hole).
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Close the hoist shaft access cover.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the tools, follow these steps:
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case
you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in
the top-box storage unit.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with
the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-79
3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover
wing nuts.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Spare Tire
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves
streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from the
use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it
states that it should not be used on plastic parts,
do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-101.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,
etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners
that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches, and
other light surface
contamination.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines,
and protects tires.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Quickly removes
spots and stains from
carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and
surface contaminants.
Spray on and wipe off.
Odor Eliminator
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel
fuse block access
door is located on
the driver side edge of
the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver Side
Turn Signal
5
6
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
21
Usage
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Not Used
7
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
22
8
9
23
Passenger Door Module,
Universal Home Remote System
24
Not Used
Driver Seat Module,
10
11
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
25
26
Remote Keyless Entry System
Driver Power Door Lock
(Unlock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High
Mounted Stoplamp
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Driver Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
LT DR
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Harness
Connector
Usage
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
Harness Connector
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Top View
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Circuit
Usage
Breaker
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
To access the fuse/relay block, push in on the tabs
on the end of the fuse/relay block cover and lift.
Fuses
Usage
1
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
2
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
3
4
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between
your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
21
Usage
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washers
Engine Control Module,
Throttle Control
5
22
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
23
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
24
8
Oxygen Sensors
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
25
26
27
28
29
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
10
11
12
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
Horn
13
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
30
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
14
15
16
31
32
33
34
Daytime Running Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lights 2
Sunroof
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
17
18
19
20
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Key Ignition System,
Theft Deterrent System
35
36
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Windshield Wiper
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
37
Usage
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Fuses
Usage
52
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
38
Cigarette Lighter,
Auxiliary Power Outlet
53
39
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
54
55
56
40
41
Climate Controls (Ignition)
42
Audio System
Engine Control Module,
Secondary Fuel Pump (Ignition)
Miscellaneous (Ignition),
Cruise Control
43
44
45
46
47
Liftgate Release
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Take-Off
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
Compass-Temperature Mirror
48
49
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
50
51
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirror
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
65
66
67
Electric Running Boards
ENG EXH VLV Not Used
Heated Windshield Washer System
Four-Wheel Drive System
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
Cooling Fan Control
Hi Intensity Discharge Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector
Battery Power)
68
69
70
71
72
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
Power Liftgate Module
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
Fuel Pump
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Parking Lamps
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
RUN/CRANK Switched Power
Relays
FAN HI
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
FAN LO
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the Air Conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label
located under the hood. Please see your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
16.9 qt
6.0 qt†
31.5 gal
6.0 qt
16.0 L
5.7 L†
119.2 L
5.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Transfer Case Fluid
1.5 qt
1.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper
operating range.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
6.2L V8
8
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use
your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it
to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
on page 5-5.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your dealer/retailer do
these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of your
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
on page 6-10.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
✍ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.
“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-10.
✍ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
✍ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
levels and add fluid as needed.
✍ Perform any needed additional services. See
“Additional Required Services” in this section.
✍ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (b).
✍ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
✍ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
✍ Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
✍ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
✍ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (j).
See footnote (e).
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator
(if equipped). If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
✍ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
✍ Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as
needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown
for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-17.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
•
Change transfer case fluid.
See footnote (m).
•
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (g).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
are maintenance-free.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will
not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and
the maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at
least once a year.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer tailgate handle
pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, and folding seat
hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-102 for more information.
(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-61. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
on page 2-41.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
{CAUTION:
Hood Support Gas Strut Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could
be injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace
with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
System
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
For the proper viscosity, see
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Engine Oil
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Points
in Canada 10953474).
Front and
Rear Axle
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Transfer Case
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
Synthetic Grease
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Weatherstrip with Teflon, Superlube
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
GM 9985830.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco®
Part
GM Part Number
Part Number
A3086C
PF48
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
15908916
89017524
12571164
Spark Plugs
41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm)
15930910
—
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006.
In Canada, contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General
Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related
vehicle service claims. The program provides for the
review of the facts involved by an impartial third party
arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before
the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program
at the following address. Your inquiry should be
accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. General Motors
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to:
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, for
safety reasons, propane and other alternative
fuels will not be provided through this service.
As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside
Service® program.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
Who Is Covered?
Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator,
regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not
eligible for coverage.
To ensure security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100. These services
are provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no
longer within the Powertrain warranty.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated,
is covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Powertrain Warranty — 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than
an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 60 months/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty period. Items
covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may
be times when Roadside Service cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you
to secure local emergency road service, and you will
be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service®.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Service
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
Scheduling Service Appointments
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability /corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may
be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does
not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510
or write to:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Service Bulletins
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to
monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and
deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help
your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences,
such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
temperature settings.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may be made available
to others for research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle
or vehicle owner.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection
in this manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system
operating manual for information on stored data
and for deletion instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-67
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-31
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
Storage Areas (cont.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
